2008 Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using this Manual
{CAUTION:
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Index
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do Not do this”
or “Do Not let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. A
box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things
that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the
warning.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat Height Adjuster
Power Seat
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control and Power
Lumbar shown
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s seat height
adjuster is located on the outboard side of the seat.
If the vehicle has a power seat, the control used to
operate it is located on the outboard side of the driver’s
seat. To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
To raise the seat, move the lever upward repeatedly
until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,
move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is
at the desired height.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
holding the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by holding the rear of
the control up or down.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the driver’s and
passenger’s heated
seat buttons are located
on the climate control
panel below the fan switch.
Driver’s side button
shown, Passenger’s
side button similar
If your vehicle has this feature, the control is located on
the outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion.
Press the button once to turn the heated seat to the
high setting. Both lights below the heated seat symbol
will come on. Press the button a second time and
the heated seat will go to the low setting. The bottom
light will come on to indicate that the setting is on
low. Press the button a third time to turn the heated
seat off.
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the rear of
the control. Keep in mind that as your seating position
changes, as it may during long trips, so should the
position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat
as needed.
The heated seat feature will need to be turned on each
time the ignition is turned off and back on again.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Passenger’s Side Reclining Lever shown, Driver’s
Side similar
{CAUTION:
The seats have reclining seatbacks. The lever used to
operate them is located on the outboard side of the
seats. Lift the lever to release the seatback. Move the
seatback to where you want it and release the lever
to lock the seatback in place. Press rearward on
the seatback to be sure it is locked into place.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press
Head Restraints
the button, located on the
top of the seatback,
and push the restraint
down. Only the front head
restraints are adjustable.
Both the front and rear head restraints can be removed.
Press the button, located on the top of the seatback,
and pull the restraint out from the seatback. Do
not remove the head restraint if someone will be sitting
in that seat while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the occupant’s head. This
position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Folding Seatback
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a front passenger seat that folds flat.
Things you put on this seatback can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash. Remove or secure all items before
driving.
{CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo
is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object toward a person.
This could cause severe injury or even death.
Secure objects away from the area in which an
airbag would inflate. For more information, see
To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Move the front passenger seat rearward to ensure
there is enough room to fold the seatback forward.
information. The head restraint may need to be
removed if the seat is not able to be moved
fully rearward. If removing the head restraint, store
it so that it will not move while the vehicle is in
motion.
2. Make sure that the seatback is in an upright
position. Use the recliner lever located on the
outboard side of the seat to move the seatback to
the upright position.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise the seatback to an upright position:
1. Pull up on either lever.
2. Push the seatback up until it is in a locked position.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
3. To fold the seat flat, pull up on either lever located
toward the rear of the seatback. Fold the seat
forward until the seatback disengages.
4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks in the
folded position. Pull up on the seatback to be sure
it is locked.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
The seatbacks can be folded flat.
To lower the rear seatback(s):
1. Move the front seat forward and/or put the front
seatback in an upright position so it does not
interfere with folding the rear seatback forward.
2. Open the rear door while the vehicle is parked.
3. The rear head restraint may need to be removed if
it interferes with the front seat when the front seat
is moved back in place. If removed, store the
head restraint where it cannot move while the
vehicle is in motion.
4. Move the safety belt out of the way before lowering
the seatback. Do not let the safety belt get caught
between the seatback and seat cushion as the
seatback is folded.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull up on the knob
located on the top of
the seatback on
To raise the rear seatback(s):
the outboard side to
release the seatback.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1. Lift the seatback up and push rearward until you
hear a click. Keep the safety belt clear of the seat
and not twisted.
The release knob on the top of the seatback has a
red ring. If the seatback is not fully latched this
ring will be visible. Push on the seatback until the
ring is not visible.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
pull forward on the top of the seatback at the
area of the latch to be sure it is locked.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as much
protection this way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system. See
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are
met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety
belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in
a side crash or a rollover event.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position. You
can move the height
adjuster up just by pushing
up on the shoulder belt
guide.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
{CAUTION:
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of the elastic cord exposed.
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety Belt Extender
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and
never allow children to play with the safety
belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use a
child restraint.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. An infant does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash an
infant will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children should always be secured in
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
appropriate child restraints.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the
seating surface against the
back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the
harness.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint. Make
sure the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that restraint.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
attached using only the top tether and anchor.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Front Passenger
Seat — Panel and Rear
Seat Delete Models
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Rear Seat
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, this
symbol will be located on
the storage compartment
for the rear center position,
on the lower side quarter
panels for the rear outboard
positions and on the cargo
mat behind the rear seats.
Vehicles with Rear Seats
The rear outboard top tether anchors are located on
the cargo floor behind the rear seats. The rear center
top tether anchor is located in a storage compartment
behind the rear seats. Lift the lid of the storage
compartment to access the anchor. You may have
to fold back the cargo mat to access the storage
compartment and the top tether anchor for the rear
center seating position. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
information.
Vehicles without Rear Seats — Panel and Rear Seat
Delete Models
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat, there will be
an exposed top tether anchor for the front passenger
position located on the rear passenger side pillar behind
the front passenger seat.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
2.1. To secure a child restraint in the rear center
seating position, find the storage
compartment behind the rear seats. You may
have to fold back the cargo mat to access
the storage compartment and the top
tether anchor.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
2.2. Lift the lid of the storage compartment to
access the top tether anchor for the rear
center seating position.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3. To secure a child restraint in the rear
outboard seating positions find the top
tether anchor located on the cargo floor
behind the rear seats. If your vehicle does
not have a rear seat, find the top tether
anchor located on the pillar behind the front
passenger seat. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
2.4. If the position you are using has an
adjustable headrest or head restraint, raise it.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
2.5. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-43 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
tether anchor locations.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-42.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions. See
more information on this, including important safety
information.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
page 1-65 for additional information.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-43 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
tether anchor locations.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the
page 3-32.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If your vehicle does not have a rear seat and your
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
information.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer. If no rear seat is
available, do not install a child restraint in this vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
{CAUTION:
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
If your vehicle has rollover capable roof-rail
airbags, they are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle and in the event of
a vehicle rollover. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal or in rear crashes.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with roof-rail airbags.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover. Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the
crash severity is above the system’s designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary with specific
vehicle design.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts. A roof-rail
airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle
that is struck or if the sensing system predicts that
the vehicle is about to roll over.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side windows that have
occupant seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical
attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when you start your vehicle.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol
for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer. If no rear seat is
available, do not install a child restraint in this vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional
material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions,
seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask
the person to place the seatback in the fully upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. This may unintentionally cause the passenger
sensing system to turn the airbag(s) off for some
adult size occupants. If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
page 1-71 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-31 for more on this, including
important safety information.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
page 7-15.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or
trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as
an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing
pad or device, installed under or on top of the
seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-71
for additional important information.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-31 for more information.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt
system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip
apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a
new one right away.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and the driver’s
door lock.
The key has a transponder in the key head that matches
a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column. If a
replacement key or any additional keys are needed, you
must purchase it from your dealer/retailer.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
page 7-6 for more information.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to
your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following functions may be available:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
feature, press / to start the engine from outside
the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked from
about 3 feet (1 m) up to 60 feet (18 m) away with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Q (Lock): Press Q to lock all the doors. The interior
lamps will turn off after all of the doors are closed. If
enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the
parking lamps will flash once to indicate locking has
occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn will also
chirp to indicate locking has occurred. Pressing Q
may arm the content theft-deterrent system. See
" (Unlock): Press " to unlock the driver’s door. If " is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
doors and the liftgate will unlock. The interior lamps will
come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the
ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the
hazard lamps will flash twice to indicate unlocking has
occurred and if it is dark outside, the high beams
and parking lamps will turn on and stay on for
With Remote Start and
Remote Rear Doors
Shown, Without Similar
20 seconds or until a door is opened. See LIGHT
FLASH and EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS under DIC Vehicle
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release L to activate the vehicle locate feature. The
horn will chirp three times and the headlamps and
parking lamps will flash three times.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. All transmitters
need to be re-coded to match the new transmitter.
The lost transmitter will no longer work after the new
transmitters are re-coded. Each vehicle can have
a maximum of four transmitters matched to it.
Press and hold L for three seconds to sound the
panic alarm. The horn will chirp and the headlamps and
parking lamps will flash for 30 seconds. Press L
again to cancel the panic alarm.
Battery Replacement
Remote Rear Door Operation (Panel)
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT LOW
message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATT
for additional information.
*: Press and hold * for about one second to
open the rear driver side door.
+: Press and hold + for about one second to
open the rear passenger side door.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
Programmable Horn Chirp
Through the DIC, you may choose whether or not to
have a horn chirp when you use the RKE transmitter to
lock or unlock the doors. See “LOCK HORN” and
page 3-54 for more information.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote start feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air
page 3-23 for additional information.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This button will be on the
RKE transmitter if you have remote start.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
An increased range of operation is provided with the RKE
transmitter that has the remote vehicle start button. The
vehicle can be started from approximately 197 feet (60 m)
away. However, the operating range may be less while
the engine is running and you will need to be closer to
your vehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on.
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To start the engine using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
After your vehicle’s engine has been started two times
using the remote start button, the vehicle’s ignition
switch must be turned to RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF using the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the remote
vehicle start button for four seconds or until the
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The vehicle’s doors
will be locked.
To manually shut off the engine after a remote start:
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the
remote start button until the parking lamps turn off.
When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parking lamps
will turn on and remain on while the engine is
running.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is
still running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.
• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignition switch and
turn the switch to RUN and then back to LOCK/OFF.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:
• The remote start system is disabled through the DIC.
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
After a remote start, the engine will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted into the
ignition switch and turned to ON/RUN.
• The vehicle’s hood is open
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
• There is an emission control system malfunction.
The maximum number of remote starts between ignition
cycles with the key is two.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
If the remote start procedure is used again before the first
10 minute time frame has ended, the first 10 minutes will
immediately expire and the second 10 minute time frame
will start.
• Two remote vehicle starts have already been
provided.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
To lock the driver’s door from the outside, turn the
key clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the key
counterclockwise.
Door Locks
You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to lock and unlock the doors.
{CAUTION:
From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on each door
or the power door lock switch to lock and unlock all doors.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door next to
the door handle.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
Driver’s side shown,
Passenger’s side similar
Press the top of the switch to unlock the doors. Press
the bottom of the switch to lock the doors.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Locking
Automatic Door Lock
This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors
and liftgate when the power door lock switch or remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
If your vehicle has power door locks, the doors will
automatically lock when the shift lever is moved out of
PARK (P) for a vehicle with an automatic transmission.
For a vehicle with a manual transmission, the speed
must be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
If any door is open when locking the vehicle, three
chimes will sound signaling that the delayed locking
feature is active. Five seconds after the last door
is closed, all of the doors and liftgate will lock. The turn
signal lamps will flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked. To cancel the delay and lock the
The automatic door locking feature cannot be disabled.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
doors immediately, press the lock button a second time.
If the key is in the ignition this feature will not lock
the doors.
Your vehicle will automatically unlock all doors when the
shift lever is moved into PARK (P) for a vehicle with
an automatic transaxle, and when the ignition is turned
off for a vehicle with a manual transaxle.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
you can disable this function. See DIC Vehicle
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the doors can be programmed to automatically
unlock several ways for vehicles with an automatic
page 3-54 for more information.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the security locks, do the following:
Rear Door Security Locks
1. Insert the key into the lock below the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the horizontal
position.
Vehicles with rear door security locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
On vehicles with this
feature, the rear door
security locks are located
on the inside edge of
each rear door. You must
open the rear doors to
access them.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
To open a rear door while the security lock is on, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the power door lock switch, or by
lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the lock below the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the vertical
position.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
Liftgate
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure to remove
the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
To lock the liftgate from the outside, press the lock
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To unlock the liftgate with the RKE, press the unlock
button twice within five seconds. For more information,
on page 2-5. You can also use the power door
lock switch to lock and unlock the liftgate.
The lockout protection can be overridden by pressing
and holding the power door lock in the lock position for
three seconds.
Open the liftgate by pressing the touchpad located in
the handle above the license plate. Once slightly
opened, the liftgate will rise by itself. Lamps in the rear
of the vehicle will come on, illuminating the rear
cargo area, unless the dome lamp lever is in the off
position. For more information, see Dome Lamp
on page 3-19.
Rear Side Cargo Door
The rear side cargo doors can be opened by pressing
the buttons located on the driver and passenger sides of
the instrument panel, or by using the Remote Keyless
Access (RKE) transmitter. See Instrument Panel
Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for
overhead obstructions such as a garage door,
you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the area above and
behind the liftgate is clear before opening it.
To use the buttons on the instrument panel, the driver
side door must be unlocked.
Push the door to close.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Liftgate Release
{CAUTION:
If the liftgate cannot be opened by pressing the switch
on the outside handle, the battery may be run down. See
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
To manually open the liftgate, do the following:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of the
liftgate near the center.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Locate the release
lever on the latch.
Push the release lever
rearward.
The lever is located about three inches (7.62 cm)
behind the trim in the access hole.
4. The liftgate will unlatch when the lever is pushed
rearward. Push the liftgate to open.
5. Reinstall the trim plug.
3. Insert a tool into the access hole.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
Passenger Vehicle shown, HHR Panel similar
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
HHR SS shown
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
open a small amount. Press the switch down all the
way, release it, and the window will go down
automatically.
Passenger Vehicle and HHR Panel
The window switches are located on the center console.
The passenger vehicle has switches for each rear
window located on each rear door.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press and
release the top of, or pull up on the switch.
To open a window, press the bottom of the switch.
To close a window, press the top of the switch.
Window Lockout
The power windows operate when the ignition is RUN
or ACC (Accessory), or while in Retained Accessory
page 2-25.
o (Window Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout
feature to prevent rear seat passengers from operating
the windows. Press the lockout button, located with
the power window switches, to turn the feature on and
off. When the red band on the button is showing,
the lockout feature is off.
HHR SS
The power window controls are located on each of the
side doors. The driver’s door also has switches that
control the passenger and rear windows.
Sun Visors
Press the switch to lower the window. Pull up on the
front edge of the switch to raise the window.
To block out glare, swing down the visor(s). The sun
visors can also be detached from the center mount and
swung out to cover the side windows. They can also
be slid along the rod to cover different areas of the front
window.
The power windows work when the ignition has been
turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Express-Down Window
Your vehicle has visor vanity mirrors. Swing down the
sun visor and lift the cover to expose the mirror.
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. The switch is labeled AUTO. Press
the switch part way, and the driver’s window will
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system will arm after either of these things occur:
• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.
• Sixty seconds with any door open.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will
arm immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds
if a door is open. When the open door is closed, it will
also become armed.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system. If your
vehicle has Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE), then
it has content
The security light will turn on to indicate that arming has
been initiated. Once the system is armed, the security
light will flash once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
If you do not want to arm the system, you may lock the
car with the manual lock knobs on the doors.
theft-deterrent.
Disarming the System
Arming the System
To disarm the system:
With the ignition off, you can arm the system by:
• Pressing the RKE transmitter lock button.
• Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Pressing the power door lock switch while the
driver’s door is open.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop
flashing.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+
How the System Alarm is Activated
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
If the system is armed, it can be activated by either:
• Opening the driver’s door or tailgate. This will cause
a ten second pre-alarm chirp followed by a
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Opening any other door. This will immediately cause
a full alarm of horn and lights for thirty seconds.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
To turn off the system alarm:
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The
system will then re-arm itself.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
This will also disarm the system.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will
also disarm the system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
If you hear three chirps when you press the unlock or lock
buttons on the RKE transmitter, it means that the content
theft security system alarm was previously activated.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See
your dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III+
to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-6, for more information.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be
a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn
the ignition off and try again.
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see
your dealer/retailer for service.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be
undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
with the other key, your vehicle needs service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
New Vehicle Break-In
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
page 4-34 for the trailer towing capabilities of
your vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
9(LOCK/OFF): This position locks your steering
column. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only be
able to remove your key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK/OFF.
If the steering wheel is locked, move it from right to left
and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If none of
this works, then your vehicle needs service.
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition
switch cannot be turned to LOCK/OFF unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
If you have a manual transmission, the ignition switch
can be turned to LOCK/OFF in any shift lever position.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery
is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
{CAUTION:
If you have a manual transmission removing
the key from the ignition switch will lock the
steering column and result in a loss of ability
to steer the vehicle. This could cause a
collision. If you need to turn the engine off
while the vehicle is moving, turn the key to
ACC/ACCESSORY.
/(START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON/RUN for normal driving.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door
while in LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, when
the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Key In the Ignition
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position operates
some of your electrical accessories. It unlocks the
steering wheel and ignition.
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the
key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime
will sound, when you open the driver’s door. Always
remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
R(ON/RUN): This is the position the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the switch.
The switch stays in the ON/RUN position when
the engine is running. But even when the ignition is not
running, you can use ON/RUN to operate your
electrical accessories and to display some warning and
indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
extended period of time.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Column Lock Release
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
following procedure allows the ignition to be turned to
LOCK/OFF and ignition key removal in case of a
dead battery or low voltage battery.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in PARK (P).
3. Locate the plunger.
4. Press and hold the plunger toward the driver’s door
while turning the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
Remove the key.
Have your vehicle serviced at your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.
2. Remove the cover from the bottom of the steering
column.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Starting the Engine
These vehicle accessories may be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off.
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Automatic Transmission
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). The
engine will not start in any other position -- this is a
safety feature. To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
The power windows and sunroof will continue to work
for up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened.
The radio will work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to OFF/LOCK, the radio will continue to work
for 10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in neutral position and the
parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to
the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle will not
start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down. That is
a safety feature.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up
and lubricates all moving parts.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the ignition key
is turned to the START position, and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in START for many
seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running. Engine cranking
can be stopped by turning the ignition switch
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. For
the 2.2L and 2.4L engine, the electrical cord is
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle near
the headlamp and the radiator.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
a dealer/retailer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you the
best advice for that particular area.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
shift lever is located on the console between the seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the automatic
transmission.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes first and then press the shift
lever button before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out
of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and
push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift
lever button and then move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of PARK (P) (Automatic
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,
on page 4-26.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving with the
automatic transmission. It provides the best fuel
economy for your vehicle. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
You might choose INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of
DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding roads and
when towing a trailer, so that there is less shifting
between gears.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed more
than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actually using
your brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or in
deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in LOW (L),
the transmission will not shift into LOW (L) until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for
normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed
without using your brakes for slight downgrades where
the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to
steepness of grade. If constant upshifting or
downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, this
position can be used to prevent repetitive types of shifts.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch pedal. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
Manual Transmission Operation
This is the shift pattern.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal down as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal down.
Here is how to operate the manual transmission:
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal down and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal down and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal down
as you press the accelerator pedal down.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Up-Shift Light
If you have a manual
transmission, you may
have an up-shift light. This
light will show you when
to shift to the next
higher gear for the best
fuel economy.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly
and shift when the light comes on.
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the light when you downshift.
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Do not shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake
{CAUTION:
If the front passenger seat back is folded
down, the armrest may make it awkward to
grab and pull up the parking brake lever. If the
lever is not pulled up far enough, your vehicle
may roll and you or others could be injured.
Move your hand lower on the lever or raise the
seat back so that you can set the brake.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
The parking brake lever is located between the front
seats.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime will
sound and a warning message will be displayed
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is
moving faster than 5 mph (8 kph). See DIC Warnings
CAUTION: (Continued)
You or others could be injured. To be sure
your vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a
page 4-34.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Transmission)
To shift into PARK (P), do the following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
page 2-33 for more information.
{CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key in your hand, your
vehicle is in PARK (P).
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift into
PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of
PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)
properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find
out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your automatic transmission vehicle
with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in
PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved the shift lever
into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then,
see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To shift out of PARK (P):
Shifting Out of PARK (P) (Automatic
Transmission)
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK (P)
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is
applied.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer or a professional towing service.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of a an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission)
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
information.
Before leaving your vehicle, fully press the clutch pedal
down, move the shift lever into REVERSE (R), and
firmly apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has
been placed in REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal
pressed down, you can turn the ignition key to LOCK,
remove the key and release the clutch pedal. See
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
on page 4-34.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the buttons located at the bottom of the mirror to
turn the map lights on or off.
Mirrors
There are three additional buttons for the OnStar®
system. See your dealer/retailer for more information on
the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®. See
OnStar® in the Index for more information.
Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment
allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the
lamps behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use
and pull it for nighttime use.
O (On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automatic
dimming feature.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:
The mirror may have lights located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button next to each light to turn it
on or off.
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to
the left of the on/off button, is on. If it is not,
press and hold the on/off button until the green light
comes on.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by
pressing and holding the on/off button until the
green indicator light turns off.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with OnStar®, compass, and map lights. The
compass automatically calibrates, or sets the driving
direction, as the vehicle is driven. The automatic
dimming feature enables the rearview mirror to sense
nighttime glare from vehicle headlamps from behind and
automatically dim to reduce the glare to a safe level.
The automatic dimming feature turns on each time the
vehicle is started.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button to turn the compass on or off.
The direction the vehicle is facing appears on the mirror.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Calibration
If a compass direction, (N for North for example) does not
appear, there may be a strong magnetic field interfering
with the compass. This can be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, note pad holder, or similar objects. If the
word CAL appears in the compass window, the compass
may need to be reset or calibrated.
To calibrate the compass, do the following:
1. Make sure CAL is displayed on the mirror. If not,
press and hold the on/off button until CAL displays.
2. While CAL is displayed, drive the vehicle in circles
at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until a direction appears
on the mirror.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted for compass variance, the compass
could give false readings.
2. Press and hold the compass button until a Z and a
zone number appears on the mirror.
3. Once the zone number appears on the mirror,
press the compass button quickly until the
correct zone number displays. If CAL appears in
the compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” listed
previously.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
The compass must be adjusted to compensate for
compass variance if the vehicle is driven outside
zone eight.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
While cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to the left
of the on/off button, is on. If it’s not, press the on/off
button until the green light comes on, indicating that
the mirror is in automatic dimming mode.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by
pressing the on/off button until the green indicator
light turns off.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass and map lights. The compass
feature enables the mirror to sense nighttime glare from
vehicle headlamps from behind and automatically
dim to reduce the glare to a safe level. The automatic
dimming feature turns on each time the vehicle is
started. Press the buttons located at the bottom of the
mirror to turn the map lights on or off.
Compass Operation
Y: This is the on/off button for the compass feature.
Press this button once to turn the compass on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for a few
seconds. After a few seconds, the mirror will display the
current compass direction.
O (On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automatic
dimming feature.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
Compass Calibration
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the
letter C or CAL appears in the compass window, the
compass may need to be reset or calibrated.
To calibrate the compass, do the following:
1. Make sure CAL is displayed in the display. If CAL is
not displayed, press and hold the compass button
until CAL is displayed.
2. While CAL is displayed, drive the vehicle in circles
at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted for compass variance, the compass
could give false readings.
2. Press and hold the compass button until a Z and a
zone number appear on the display.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
driven outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
such as a long distance, cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust the compass variance.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Once the zone number appears on the display, press
the compass button quickly until you reach the
correct zone number. If C or CAL appears in the
compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” listed
previously.
To adjust the mirror, press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to move the mirror in the
direction you want it to go. Adjust each outside mirror so
that you can see some of your vehicle and the area
behind your vehicle while sitting in a comfortable driving
position. These mirrors can be manually folded
forward or rearward.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
The controls for the
outside power mirrors are
located on the driver’s
door armrest.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Press the left or right side of the selector switch located
beneath the control pad, to choose the driver or
passenger mirror. Keep the selector switch in the center
position when not adjusting either outside mirror.
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,
look farther away than they really are.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
For more information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button
to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this
plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions
& Connections Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar.
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar
Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar
service at any time by contacting OnStar. A complete
OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar
Subscriber glove box literature.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an
OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Virtual Advisor
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentary
minutes
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only available in the
continental U.S.).
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Location information about your vehicle is only available if
the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
How OnStar Service Works
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call
Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the accident that your
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your
vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based services.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is an SS model, the automatic
transmission vehicles have a cupholder in front of the
shifter.
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
this means that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
is active.
Cupholders have inserts that can be removed for
cleaning.
Instrument Panel Storage
Your vehicle has a storage compartment on the
instrument panel above the air vents. Push the button
on the compartment to open the lid.
Storage Areas
Floor Console Storage Area
Glove Box
There are two small storage compartments on the floor
console, one at the front under the window switches
and one next to the parking brake lever.
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
Cupholder(s)
For the SS model, automatic transmission vehicles have
a storage bin on the right side of the automatic shifter.
Manual transmission vehicles have storage bins in
front of and behind the manual shifter.
There are two cupholders located in the floor console
between the front seats. There is also a cupholder
for the rear seat passenger located at the rear of the
floor console.
Rubber liners can be removed for cleaning.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Storage Area
To use the panel in the first position:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the lower
guides.
Your vehicle may have two rear storage areas that can
be used for the convenience net or other small items.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock it in
place.
Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover
The panel can be used in this position if you need
additional space above the panel. Place the cargo on
top of the panel in this position.
Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel/cargo cover
feature. The panel/cargo cover can be adjusted into
four positions.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If you were to carry things on the adjustable
panel when it is in the upper (cargo cover) or
center positions, during a sudden vehicle
movement or a crash, those things could be
thrown around in the vehicle. You or others
could be injured. When it is in the upper or
center position, always secure any cargo on
the floor beneath the panel/cover.
To use the panel in the second position:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the top
guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock it in
place.
The third position is with the front corners placed in the
lower guides and the rear corners placed in the
upper guides. Do not load cargo on the panel in this
position.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fourth position is with the front corners placed in
the lower guides closest to the rear seat for subfloor
access. Do not drive while the panel is in this position.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The panel can be used as a cargo cover for the
rear area. It has hooks underneath for shopping bags.
What you are carrying could be violently torn
off, and this could cause you or other drivers
to have a collision, and of course damage your
vehicle. You may be able to carry something
like this inside. But, never carry something
longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top
of your vehicle.
Your vehicle may have a cargo mat that covers the
panel/cargo cover.
Roof Rack System
Your vehicle may be equipped with a roof rack system.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg) or hangs over
the rear sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as
far forward as possible and against the side
rails making sure to fasten it securely.
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress and
so forth — the wind can catch it as you drive
along. This can cause you to lose control.
Notice: Loading cargo directly on the roof of the
vehicle may cause damage to the vehicle and would
not be covered under warranty. Do not place
cargo on the roof the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-27.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
check frequently to ensure your cargo is securely
fastened.
Hideaway Rear Storage Bins
The roof rack system has siderails that are attached to
the roof. All cargo must be loaded on the luggage
carrier crossrails only.
Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with
your roof rack system, these are available at your
GM dealer.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The metal
rings in the cargo area can be used to attach the
convenience net for several uses. The net can be used
to attach items secured to the floor, to the rear liftgate
or liftgate glass. The net is not for larger, heavier loads.
Your vehicle may have two storage bins located in the
rear of the vehicle. Pull up on the handles to open
and lift the lid. Use the key to lock/unlock the bins.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a power sunroof.
The switches that operate
the sunroof are located in
the headliner.
There is a metal rod that hooks into place to prop open
the lid. Push the rod towards the lid to unhook it and
lower the lid.
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be in
RUN, in ACC, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must
page 2-25.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Open: To express open the power sunroof,
fully press the driver’s side switch rearward once.
To stop the sunroof glass in a desired position other
than to the express-open position, press the switch
again, in either direction, to stop the movement. If the
sunshade is in the closed position, it will open with
the sunroof, or it can be opened manually.
Close: To close the power sunroof, operate the controls
according to one of the following:
• From the open position, press and hold the driver’s
side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must be
closed manually.
• From the vent position, press and hold the
passenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.
Vent Open: To open to the vent position from the
closed position, press and hold the passenger’s side
sunroof switch forward. The rear of the sunroof panel will
tilt upward to the full vent position. The sunshade
must be opened manually.
Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of the sunroof
while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point
of the obstruction. The sunroof will then return to
the full-open or vent position. To close the sunroof once
it has re-opened, refer to the two options previously
described under the “Close” feature instructions.
Express Close: To express close the power sunroof,
fully press the driver’s side switch forward once. To stop
the sunroof glass in a desired position other than
closed, press the switch again in either direction. The
sunshade must be closed manually.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
M. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). See
on page 3-23.
page 3-10.
R. Power Window Switches (If Equipped, Passenger
page 2-47.
G. Traction Control System (TCS) Button (If Equipped).
Electronic Stability Control (ESC). See Electronic
T. Accessory Power Outlet (If Equipped). Cigarette
Lighter (If Equipped). See Accessory Power Outlet(s)
on page 3-22.
I. Rear Side Cargo Door Buttons (If Equipped). See
page 3-18.
K. Driver Information Center (DIC) Steering Wheel
page 3-46.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police and
others that you have a problem. The front and rear
turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
towards the center of
the instrument panel.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols located on
the steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals do not work.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if the key is not in the
ignition switch.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To tilt the wheel, pull the lever down. Then, move the
wheel to a comfortable position and raise the lever
to lock the wheel in place.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
on page 3-15.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned
out, replace it to help avoid an accident.
If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn,
page 5-119.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wipers
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If the wiper blades are frozen to the
windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades
do become damaged, install new blades or blade
page 5-50.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. If
the wipers gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away
the snow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.
Use this lever, located on the right side of the steering
wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at high speed.
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at low speed.
&(Delay): Move the lever to this position to set a
delay between wipes.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
6 (Delay/Intermittent Speed Sensitive): When the
lever is in the delay position, move the intermittent adjust
band to set for shorter or longer delay cycles. To the
left of the adjust band are bars that indicate the
frequency of the wipes. Smaller bars mean the wiper
movement is less frequent. Larger bars mean the wiper
movement is more frequent.
To wash your windshield, press the button at the end of
the lever until the washers begin.
{CAUTION:
During intermittent wiping mode, the delay cycle time is
sensitive to vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed
increases your delay cycle time will decrease and wiper
movement will occur more frequently.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
When you release the button, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for about three times
or will resume the speed you were using before.
8(Mist): Move the lever all the way down to mist
and release for a single wiping cycle. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wipe and the lever will return to
its original position. If additional wipes are needed,
hold the band on mist longer.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for
more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps will turn
on automatically. They will turn off 15 seconds after
the wipers are turned off.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 (Delay): Press this side of the button to turn on the
intermittent wiping setting that has a longer delay.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window
washer/wiper button is
located on the instrument
panel below the climate
controls.
Y (Washer Fluid): Press this button to wash and wipe
the window.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
windows, check the fluid level.
Z (Rear Wiper): Press this side of the button to turn
on an intermittent setting that has a shorter delay.
{CAUTION:
To turn either of the intermittent wiper settings off, press
the opposite side of the button to turn it to the off
position. Pressing the button all the way down on either
side will activate an intermittent wiper setting.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the
outboard side of the
steering wheel.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
J(On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise control
system on and off. The indicator light on the button
will be on when the cruise control is on and go off when
the cruise control is turned off.
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then the brake is applied. This will disengage
the cruise control. To return to the previously set speed,
you do not need to go through the set process again.
Once the vehicle is going about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more, you can press the RES+ part of the button
briefly.
RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume a set
speed and to accelerate the speed.
SET− (Set): Press this button to set a speed and to
decrease the speed.
The vehicle goes back to the previously set speed.
To set a speed do the following:
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.
The indicator light on the button will come on.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
2. Get to the speed you want.
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the brake
pedal, but do not turn it off. Accelerate to a higher
speed and reset the cruise control.
3. Press the SET− control button and release it. The
CRUISE ENGAGED message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) to show the system
is engaged.
2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+ button. Hold it there until reach
the desired speed, and then release the button. To
increase the vehicle speed in very small amounts,
press the RES+ button briefly and then release
it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When you apply the brakes or operate the clutch pedal,
the cruise control will shut off.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction
conditions allow, the cruise control can be used again.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Ending Cruise Control
To end cruise control, step lightly on the brake pedal or
the clutch pedal if your vehicle has a manual
transmission.
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
• Push and hold the SET− button until the lower
Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch pedal will only end
the current cruise control session. Press the cruise
control on/off button to turn the system completely off.
speed desired is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET− button briefly. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
slows down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.
When the brakes are applied the cruise control turns off.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do
not use cruise control on steep hills.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P(Off/On): This position is the momentary Off/On
switch for the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada,
this only works when the vehicles with an automatic
transaxle are in PARK (P) and vehicles with a manual
transaxle have the parking brake set and the vehicle
is not moving.
Headlamps
When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of the
switch to off/on will turn off the Automatic Headlamp
System. An AUTO LIGHTS OFF message will display on
the driver information center and a chime will sound.
Rotating the switch to off/on again will turn the Automatic
Headlamp System back on. An AUTO LIGHTS ON
message will display on the driver information center.
The Automatic Headlamp System is always turned on at
the beginning of an ignition cycle for vehicles with
manual transaxle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp switch has the following four positions:
2(Headlamps): This position turns on the
headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.
;(Parking Lamps): This position turns on the
parking lamps and taillamps only.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): This position
automatically turns on the Daytime Running Lamps
during daytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps at night.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument
panel. Make sure it is not covered or the headlamps
will come on when you do not need them.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers are turned on. For this
feature to work, automatic lighting must be enabled. See
The DRL system will make the headlamps come on at
reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also turn
off 15 seconds after the windshield wiper control is
turned off.
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).
Headlamps on Reminder
While the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, and instrument panel lights will not be
illuminated.
If the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off and
the lamps on, a warning chime will sound. This lets you
know that the headlamps are still on.
The DRL system will be off any time your vehicle is in
PARK (P). The DRL system on U.S. vehicles can
also be turned off by using the off/on switch for one
ignition cycle.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
lamp system will come on immediately. Once you
leave the garage, it will take about 20 seconds for the
automatic lamp system to change to DRL if it is
light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
the instrument panel brightness control is in the full
bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 3-18.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic system
will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, instrument panel lights, and
interior switch backlighting.
Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument
panel. Make sure it is not covered, or the headlamps
may remain on when you do not need them.
To idle your vehicle with the system off, turn the ignition
on and turn the exterior light switch to the off/on
position. For Canadian vehicles, the transaxle must stay
in PARK (P) for this function or the parking brake
must be set for vehicles with manual transaxles.
The system may also be on when driving through a
parking garage, heavy overcast weather or a tunnel.
This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the automatic lamp control
system so that driving under bridges or bright overhead
street lights does not affect the system. The automatic
lamp control system will only be affected when the light
sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than
this delay.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamps when you need them.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
If your vehicle is equipped
with a fog lamp button, it is
located to the right of
the steering wheel
The control for this feature
is located to the right of
the steering wheel
and above the radio.
and above the radio.
The ignition must be on to turn your fog lamps on.
Move the thumbwheel to the left to dim the lights or to
the right to brighten the lights.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. An indicator
light on the cluster will come on when the fog lamps are
on. Push the button again to turn the fog lamps off.
The dome lamps will turn on when the thumbwheel is
moved completely to the right.
The parking lamps will automatically turn on and
off when the fog lamps are turned on and off.
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamp
Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside your vehicle will go on when you open
any door. These lamps will fade out after about
20 seconds after all of the doors have been closed or
when the ignition is turned to ON. These lamps will also
go on when you press the unlock symbol button or
the horn symbol on the keyless entry system transmitter.
The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about
20 seconds after your key is removed from the ignition
to provide an illuminated exit.
Mirror Reading Lamps
Your vehicle may have reading lamps on the rearview
mirror. Push the button to turn the reading lamps on and
off. The reading lamps will automatically come on
when a door is open.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn the lamp
off, even when a door is opened.
Rear Reading Lamps
1(Door): Move the lever to this position to turn the
lamp on whenever a door is opened.
Push the lens to turn the reading lamps on and off.
The dome lamp and mirror reading lamps will turn on if
the lever is in the door position and the instrument panel
brightness control is turned to the brightest setting. See
+(On): Move the lever to this position to turn on the
dome lamp.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
Battery Run-Down Protection
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or voltage display on the Driver Information Center
(DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down.
This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
Your vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to
protect the vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after 20 minutes. This
prevents draining of the battery.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or CB
radio.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
The accessory power outlets are located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls and at the
rear of the center console. There may be an outlet in the
rear cargo area on the passenger side.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. While not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Rear Power Plug for Converters
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Your vehicle may have a power plug connector located
in the rear cargo area on the passenger side behind
the service panel. The power connector wiring can
be accessed by removing the service panel to begin
installation.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This plug can be used to supply power to commercial
converters and contains four different circuits. The
functions of these circuits are as follows; a 40 Amp
battery service, a 10 Amp Accessory or Run service, a
15 Amp Delayed Accessory service and a Ground
circuit.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 40 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not
use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 15 amperes.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
To clean the center console ashtray, remove the entire
ashtray and empty it.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 40 ampere rating.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
) (Bi-Level): This mode splits the air between the
Climate Controls
instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets.
Climate Control System
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield and
side windows.
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle
can be controlled with this system.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
For vehicles with remote start, the climate control
system comes on and uses the prior temperature
settings selected before you exited the vehicle.
Recirculation mode is not allowed in this mode.
9 (Fan): Turn the center knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. The fan must be turned on to run
the air conditioning (AC) compressor.
9 (Off): To turn the fan off, turn the knob all the way
counterclockwise to the off position.
Temperature Control: Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
Operation
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to
help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
An indicator light above the symbol comes on in this
mode. The air conditioning compressor also comes on.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This mode is not available for floor, defog and defrost
modes. When the recirculation button is pressed, the
recirculation indicator light will flash five times and outside
air will be delivered. Operation in this mode during
periods of high humidity and cool outside temperatures
may result in increased window fogging. If window
fogging is experienced, select the defrost mode.
For quick cool down on hot days:
1. Select H .
2. Select @ .
3. Select # .
4. Select the coolest temperature.
; (Outside Air): Press this button to allow outside
air to circulate through your vehicle. An indicator
light above the symbol comes on in this mode.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become
too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
the vehicle has cooled, turn off the recirculation by
pressing the outside air button.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning system on or off. When this button
is pressed, an indicator light below the symbol comes
on to show that the air conditioning is activated.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip underneath
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
The air conditioning compressor cannot be turned on
when the fan is off.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield and side windows. Use the
defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and
warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to
remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in ON/RUN.
< (Rear): Press the button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from
the rear window as possible. An indicator light below
the symbol comes on to show that the rear window
defogger is activated.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
The rear window defogger turns off approximately
15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger only runs for approximately seven
minutes before turning off. If turned on again, the
defogger will only run for approximately seven minutes
before turning off.
- (Defog): This mode directs approximately half of the
air to the windshield and the side window outlets and half
to the floor outlets. When this mode is selected the
system runs the air conditioning compressor. To defog
the windows faster, turn the temperature control knob
clockwise to the warmest setting.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 50 mph (80 km/h)
and the rear defogger is active, it remains on as long as
the speed is greater than 50 mph (80 km/h). The
defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button
again or by turning off the engine.
Recirculation mode is not available in defog mode.
0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side window
outlets and the floor outlets. When this mode is selected
the system runs the air conditioning compressor. To
defrost the windows faster, turn the temperature control
knob clockwise to the warmest setting.
Recirculation mode is not available in defog mode.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the rear
defogger automatically turns on if it is cold outside.
When the vehicle transitions out of the remote start
mode, the rear defogger turns off. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Passenger compartment air, both outside air and
recirculated air, is routed through a passenger
compartment filter. The filter removes certain particles
from the air, including pollen and dust particles.
Reductions in airflow, which may occur more quickly in
dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs to be
replaced early.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for replacement intervals. See your
dealer for details on changing the filter. To find out what
type of filter to use, see Maintenance Replacement
Outlet Adjustment
Turn the outlets and move the outlet vanes to change
the direction of the airflow and to open and close
the outlets.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the passenger compartment air filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all articles from the
inside.
3. Pull each of the three tabs of the filter access door
down and open the access door downward.
2. Release the glove box stops by pushing them both
outward to let the glove box drop open completely.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This section describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As the
details show on the next few pages, some warning lights
come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you
know they are working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
4. Pull the filter out, keeping it face up so as not to
drop any dust into the passenger compartment
upon removal.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when there is
a problem with your vehicle.
When installing a new air filter make sure the AIR
FLOW arrow is pointing downward. Reverse Steps 1
through 4 making sure the glove box door is back into
place.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on as
you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that tells you what
to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting
to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous. So get to
know your vehicle’s warning lights and gages. They can
be a big help.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you will need to drive safely and
economically.
United States Cluster shown, SS and Canada similar
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
tachometer in the red warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged and the damages would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not operate the
engine with the tachometer in the red warning area.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the driver
information center. You can set a Trip A and Trip B
odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC Operation
Safety Belt Reminders
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply open the driver’s door and the
mileage will be displayed briefly.
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old
odometer.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
Tachometer
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for several
seconds and then flash for several more.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. The
light should go out and the
system is ready.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you
use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if your vehicle has this feature, you may not see
the system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you start the engine. If the light does not
come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a
problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.
more information.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Charging System Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, but the engine
is not running, as a
check to show you it is
working.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-31 for more on this, including
important safety information.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also
for more information. This light could indicate that you
have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If
you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Up-Shift Light
Your vehicle may have an
up-shift light.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when the engine is
started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
When this light comes on, you should shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions allow
you to.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set the parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
more information.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake is
fully released. You may notice that the pedal is harder
to push or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It
may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-32.
Antilock Brake System Warning
Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light will come
on briefly when you
start the engine.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-35
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
brake related DIC messages.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enhanced Traction System Warning
Light
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System
(TCS) Indicator/Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Enhanced Traction System
(ETS), this warning light
should come on briefly as
you start the engine.
This light is located in the
center of the instrument
panel cluster.
If the warning light does not come on, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
For vehicles that have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system or the Traction Control System (TCS), this
warning light should come on briefly when the engine
is started.
If the warning light is on and not flashing, the ETS
system may have been disabled. Check all related
Driver Information Center (DIC) messages to determine
whether the system has been turned off or if the
system is not working properly and your vehicle requires
service. If the ETS has been disabled, wheel spin will
not be limited.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
This light, along with the appropriate Driver Information
Center (DIC) messages, indicates when the ESC
system and the TCS are working or are disabled.
If the warning light is on and flashing, the ETS is
actively working. The LOW TRACTION DIC message
will also appear when the system is actively limiting
wheel spin.
information.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check
your DIC messaging to determine which feature(s) is
no longer functioning and whether it is because of
the driver turning off the feature(s), or the system may
not be working properly and your vehicle requires
service. If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin will not be
limited. If the ESC system is disabled, the system
will not aid in maintaining vehicle directional control. In
either case, adjust your driving accordingly.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
If the light is on and flashing, the TCS or the ESC
system is actively working. Check the DIC messaging
for details to determine which system is working. If
the LOW TRACTION message appears, the system is
limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE message
appears, the system is aiding in maintaining vehicle
directional control.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
page 5-26 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by your warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on.
information.
more information on the messages associated with this
light.
This light will also come on briefly when starting your
vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
Your vehicle has an
Your vehicle may have a
tire pressure light.
engine coolant temperature
gage. With the ignition
turned to RUN, this gage
shows the engine
coolant temperature.
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started
and provides information about tire pressures and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine
is too hot. It means that your engine coolant has
overheated.
When the Light is Solid
This indicates that one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
information. Stop and check your tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate that
there is an OBD II
problem and service is
required.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
Solid
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light will flash for
about a minute and then stay on solid for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with
every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-61 for more information.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
If the Light is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light will come on
briefly when you start your
engine. If it does not,
have your vehicle serviced.
Oil Pressure Light
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
is not flowing through your engine properly. You
could be low on oil and you might have some other
system problem.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Highbeam On Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
page 2-18.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
for more information.
Fog Lamp Light
Fuel Gage
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
Boost Gage
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
United States
Canada
If equipped, this gage indicates vacuum during light to
moderate throttle and boost under heavier throttle.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
This gage displays the air pressure level in the intake
manifold before it enters the engine’s combustion
chamber.
This gage is automatically centered at zero every time
the engine is started. Actual vacuum or boost is
displayed from this zero point. Changes in ambient
pressure, such as driving in mountains and changing
weather, will slightly change the zero reading.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver
personalization menu modes and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the
following.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side of
the steering wheel.
Information Modes
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer display. This mode shows
the temperature outside of the vehicle in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and the total
distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). The outside air temperature appears
on the left side of the DIC display and the odometer
appears on the right side of the display.
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization menu
mode setting, or acknowledge a warning message.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
page 3-54.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRIP A or TRIP B
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B
display. These modes show the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers can
be used at the same time.
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG
displays. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your
vehicle is getting based on current and past driving
conditions.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button for a few seconds while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting
from that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset,
it is continually updated each time you drive.
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance you
can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy
at a particular moment and changes frequently as
driving conditions change. This mode shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average
fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system
while driving, a message advising you to check the tire
pressure appears in the display. See Inflation - Tire
on page 3-48 for more information.
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system
is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
DIC Warnings and Messages
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil
life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems.
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC
buttons. If the condition is still present, the warning
message comes back on the next time the vehicle is
turned off and back on. With most messages, a warning
chime sounds when the message displays. Your
vehicle may have other warning messages.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
COOLANT
Press the information button until COOLANT displays.
This mode shows the temperature of the engine coolant
in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
Tire Pressure
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch. See
information.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure is shown in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays
for the front tires. Press the information button again
until LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch. See
information.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one
or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See
shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and
tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire Pressure
BRAKE FLUID
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on. See
information. Have the brake system serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
COMPETITIVE MODE
CHANGE OIL SOON
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when the Competitive Driving mode is selected.
The Traction Control System (TCS) will not be operating
while in the Competitive Driving mode and the
ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster will be on
solid. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
information.
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
the display, the engine oil life system must still be
more information.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it
is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the message off.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COOLING MODE ON
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
This message may display on some vehicles. Under
severe conditions, hot ambient temperatures, steep
grades, and towing, your vehicle may experience more
transmission shifting. This is temporary and normal
under these conditions. This does not require engine or
transmission service.
This message displays to inform you that the vehicle
has reduced engine power to avoid damaging the
engine. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s
ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there
is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven
at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
CRUISE ENGAGED
This message displays when the cruise control system
information.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
DOOR AJAR
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle. You
may feel or hear the system working and see this
message displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditions
may exist when this message is displayed, so adjust
your driving accordingly. This message may stay on for
a few seconds after ESC stops assisting you with
directional control of the vehicle. This is normal when
the system is operating. See Electronic Stability Control
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s
doors are not closed properly. Make sure that the
door(s) are closed completely.
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) NOT
READY
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message may display briefly after starting the
vehicle if the system’s sensors are not yet calibrated.
The system is not functional until the message
stops displaying. Adjust your driving accordingly. When
the message is no longer displayed, the system is
page 4-10 for more information.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery in
the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-5.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
LAUNCH CONTROL
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESC
is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See
more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
after the COMPETITIVE MODE message when the
vehicle is stopped. Launch control is a form of traction
control to control wheel spin while launching the
vehicle during closed track events and competitive
driving venues. The system will exit to COMPETITIVE
MODE after the vehicle is launched. See
“COMPETITIVE MODE” earlier in this section. See
“Launch Control” under Electronic Stability Control
GATE AJAR
This message displays when the liftgate is not closed
completely. Make sure that the liftgate is closed
information.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOW TRACTION
SERVICE AIR BAG
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is
actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may
exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your
driving accordingly. This message stays on for a few
seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin. See
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light on page 3-37
more information.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and a chime sounds if there has
been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This
light stays on solid as long as the detected problem
remains present. When this message displays, the
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
more information.
PARKING BRAKE
This message displays if the parking brake is left
information.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING
This message displays if a problem has been detected
with the electric power steering. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TRACTION
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and a chime sounds when the system is not
functioning properly. The ETS light or the ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This
light stays on solid as long as the detected problem
remains present. When this message displays, the
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
not working properly. The tire pressure light also
flashes and then remains on during the same ignition
conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
information. If the warning comes on and stays on, there
may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer/retailer.
page 3-37 for more information. Have the system
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
TRACTION OFF
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light on page 3-37
more information.
SVC (Service) BRAKE SYSTEM
This message may display if you have a turbocharged
vehicle with Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and if
the hydraulic brake boost is not working or is working
improperly. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL LIFE RESET
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the features available will be
displayed on the DIC.
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil
information.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since that time.
UNITS
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units.
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to enter
the personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
remote start to be turned off or on. Remote start allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle
using your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
When REMOTE START appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
page 2-5 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
UNLOCK HORN
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on
the first press of the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or
disabled. When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least one
second to scroll through the available settings:
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
LOCK HORN
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When LOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least one
second to scroll through the available settings:
page 2-5 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn
will still chirp on the second press.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHT FLASH
DELAY LOCK
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
hazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock or
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When LIGHT FLASH appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power lock
switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter a second time.
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not
flash when the lock or unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock or unlock button on the
RKE transmitter is pressed.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter.
page 2-5 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic
Transmission Only)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
This screen displays only if your vehicle has an
automatic transmission and DRIVER or ALL is selected
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
turned off.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock. You
will need to manually unlock the doors.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
If you have a manual transmission vehicle, the door(s)
will automatically unlock when the key is turned off.
page 2-10 for more information.
If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, you can
select when the automatic unlocking will occur. See
“UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transmission Only)”
following.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
page 2-10 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
LANGUAGE
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When EXT
LIGHTS appears on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
page 2-5 for more information.
Exiting Personalization Menu
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
Setting the Clock
24 hour, press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow label. Once the
time 12H and 24H are displayed, press the pushbutton
located under the desired option to select the default.
Without Date Display
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD
Player
Press the H button again to apply the selected default,
or let the screen time out.
This type of radio has a H (clock) button for setting the
time. You can set the time by following these steps:
With Date Display
Single CD (MP3) Player
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN. Press the O (power) knob, located in
the center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
This type of radio has a H button for setting the time
and date.
2. Press the H button until the hour begins flashing
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
on the display. Press the H button a second time
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN. Press the O knob, located in
the center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
and the minute begins flashing on the display.
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers are
flashing, turn the f (tune) knob, located on the
upper right side of the radio, clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the time.
2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
4. Press the H button again until the clock display
stops flashing to set the currently displayed time;
otherwise, the flashing stops after five seconds and
the current time displayed is automatically set.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
Six-Disc CD (MP3) Player
This type of radio has a MENU button instead of the H
button to set the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or \ FWD
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN. Press theO knob, located in the
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left ©
2. Press the MENU button. Once the clock option is
displayed.
SEEK arrow or s REV button, or turn the f
knob, located on the upper right side of the radio.
3. Press the pushbutton located under that label. The
HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press the H button while the radio is on. The date
with display times out after a few seconds and goes
back to the normal radio and time display.
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or \ FWD
button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left ©
SEEK arrow or s REV button, or turn the f
knob, located on the upper right side of the radio.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
Radio(s)
date press the MENU button and then the H button
while the radio is on. The date with display times
out after a few seconds and goes back to the normal
radio and time display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow label. Once
the time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY
(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,
month, and year) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
Radio with CD (Base)
3. Press the H or MENU button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with the
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature will
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for
road and wind noise as the vehicle’s speed changes
while driving, so that the volume level is consistent. To
activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD
(MP3) similar
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your radio may have a Radio Data System (RDS). The
RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
only works when the information is available. While the
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station
name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station
can broadcast incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) can
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the
labels and the information about that label displays.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1 and
FM2, AM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
While information is not available, No Info displays.
© SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous or
Setting Preset Stations (Radio with
CD (Base))
to the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a few
seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station,
plays for a few seconds, then goes on to the next station.
Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4 (Information) (Radio with CD (Base)): Press to switch
the display between the radio station frequency and the
time. While the ignition is off, press this button to display
the time.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.
When that pushbutton is pressed and released,
the station that was set, returns.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3, and
RDS Features): Press to display additional text
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
information related to the current FM-RDS or XM™
station, or MP3 song. A choice of additional information
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1
through 6 label.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
To store a station as a favorite, perform the following
steps:
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) (Radio
with CD (Base))
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass or
treble, press the f knob or the BASS/TREBLE
pushbutton until the desired tone control label displays.
Turn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the setting. The current bass or
treble level displays. If a station’s frequency is weak, or
has static, decrease the treble.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
EQ (Equalization): Press to adjust BASS and TREBLE
Settings.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return to the manual mode, press until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
or treble by pressing the f knob.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
(Radio with CD (Base))
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can be adjusted by
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
or fade, press this button or the f knob until the desired
speaker control label displays. Turn the f knob
pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward), or
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the setting.
s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels
are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or has
static, decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the
desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. The
highlighted setting can be adjusted by pressing
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until
the desired levels are obtained.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select preset equalization
settings.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display your favorites
again.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT
label.
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™
stations while the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find
XM™ channels within a desired category, perform
the following:
3. Turn the f knob to display the category you want
removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency is
displayed. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels on the radio display. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the desired category
name displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category displays or by pressing the pushbutton under
the Restore All label.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first
XM™ station associated with that category.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below the
right or left arrows displayed, or press the SEEK
arrows to go to the previous or to the next
XM™ station within the selected category.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Messages for XM Only
Radio Messages
section for further detail.
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
Loc or Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the ^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM™ service. For
more information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca
or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds. A
beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on the
CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Care of Your CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Care of Your CDs
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole
and the outer edge.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD
player and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, you can
listen to the tracks in random, rather than sequential
order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player. To
use random on the Radio with CD (Base), do one of
the following:
Z EJECT: Press to eject CD(s). To eject the CD that
is currently playing, press and release this button. A
beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc
is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be
removed. If the CD is not removed after several
seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into the player
and begins playing.
1. Press to play tracks from the CD you are listening
to in random order. The random icon displays.
2. Press again to turn off random play. The random
icon disappears from the display.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
To use random on the Radio with CD (MP3) or the
Radio with Six-Disc player, do one of the following:
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD player,
insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player.
A RDM label displays.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If
either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under the
RDM label until Random Current Disc displays.
Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. You will hear sound at a reduced
volume. Release to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
player, press and hold the LOAD ^ button. A beep
sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or
more discs partway into the slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. You will hear sound at a reduced
volume. Release to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RPT (Repeat): For Radios with CD (Base), one track
can be repeated by using the repeat setting.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. An arrow symbol displays.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
4 (Information) (Radio with CD (Base)): Press to switch
the display between the track number, elapsed time
of the track, and the time. When the ignition is off, press
this button to display the time.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD
is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer while reporting the problem.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing an
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on
how to play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, see Using an
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins to play audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. You can however, connect an
external audio device such as an iPod, laptop
computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape
player, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with the
following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or
a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album can
display when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. By
default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
and ignores the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT (category)
button toggles between compressed and uncompressed
audio format.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
might need to be made from the portable device.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable audio
device is playing. The portable audio device continues to
play, so you might want to stop it or turn it off.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3 Format
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
large number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on the
display, and might not fully display.
• Make sure the CD does not have more than a
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files to
read and play.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc
not to function in the player.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and
next folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.
An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded using no
file folders can also be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the
maximum are not accessible.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down and the
folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and then
goes to the root folder. When the radio displays
the name of the folder, the radio displays ROOT.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Order of Play
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
No Folder
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only compressed
files, the files are located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions are not displayed on a
CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded without folders or
playlists. When displaying the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode was chosen as the default display. The
new track name displays.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can
be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
automatically pulls back into the player and begins
playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software,
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts to
play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
c T(Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. You
will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in
order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player scans
the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It can take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3 files recorded
to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio can begin playing
while it is scanning the disc in the background. When the
scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing
again.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on
the CD-R or CD-RW can be played in random, rather
than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all discs
in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist
playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are
played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW and begins
playing MP3 files by that artist. If you want to listen to
MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbutton located
below either arrow button. The CD goes to the next or
previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing
either button until the desired artist displays.
1. To play MP3 files in random order from the CD-R
or CD-RW that is currently playing, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the
back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. The album name displays on the second line
between the arrows and songs from the current
album and begins to play. Once all songs from that
album are played, the player moves to the next album
in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3 files from that album.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When you move into an open area, the signal
should return.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while
a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
while listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number displays
while a CD is in the player. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input
Device” displays.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune to another channel.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOC, LOCK, or LOCKED could
display.
XM TheftLocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message appears after
having your vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button to silence
the system. Press this button again to turn the sound
on. If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold
this button for two seconds to activate voice on the
in this manual for more information.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If your vehicle has this
feature, some audio
controls can be adjusted at
the steering wheel. They
include the following:
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
x w (Next/Previous): Press the arrows to go to the
next or to the previous stored radio station and stay there.
Press and hold the arrows longer than three-quarters of a
second to advance ahead or reverse back to a station
with a strong signal in the selected band.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost the
power levels during the day, and then reduce these
levels during the night. Static can also occur when things
like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
When a CD is playing, press the arrows to go to the next
or to the previous track. Press and hold the arrows longer
than three-quarters of a second to continue advancing
ahead or reversing back to other tracks within the disc.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
increase or to decrease the radio volume.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the roof. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
If you are putting a protective cover over the vehicle,
remove the mast by hand.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or through tunnels could cause loss of
the XM signal for a period of time. The radio may
display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located at the rear
of the vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
If your vehicle has a roof rack, loading items onto
the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the
performance of the XM™ system. Make sure the XM™
Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Fixed Mast Antenna
This type of antenna is called a fixed mast antenna. It is
mounted at the center of the roof, just behind the
windshield.
The mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is
badly bent, replace it.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will not
drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Braking
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
and the 2.0L turbocharged engine, it also has a
hydraulic brake boost feature which supplements the
power brake system to maintain consistent brake
performance under conditions of low brake booster
vacuum. Low brake booster vacuum conditions
can include initial start up after the vehicle has been
parked for several hours, very frequent brake stops, or
high altitude driving. When hydraulic brake boost is
active, you might feel minor brake pulsation or
movement but this is normal. If brake pedal feel changes
or the brake pedal feels hard to push, you might not
be receiving the intended brake boost and the SVC
BRAKE SYSTEM DIC message may be displayed.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
If your vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel will come
on briefly when you
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
start your vehicle.
When you start the engine, or when you begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You might hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is
going on, and you might even notice that the brake
pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Assist
Braking in Emergencies
If your vehicle has ESC with ABS, it also has a brake
assist feature that responds to emergency braking
by generating additional pressure and engaging
the ABS. When this happens, the brake pedal will feel
easier to push. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let the system work for you. You might feel
the brakes vibrate or notice some noise, but this is
normal. The brakes will return to normal operation after
the brake pedal is released.
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. However, if you do not have ABS, your first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it
down — might be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot
respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in
whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very
thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
Brake assist cannot compensate for unsafe driving
practices and braking effectiveness, itself, depends on
the condition of the road, tires, and brakes and
vehicle mass.
If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that the wheels are spinning too much or
are beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power by closing the throttle and managing engine spark
to limit wheel spin.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
ABS, it is different. See Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-5.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
If your vehicle has TCS, there is a ESC/TCS button
located on the instrument panel.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light flashes while the
traction control system is
limiting wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
The Traction Control System is automatically enabled
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system enabled. You can turn TCS
off if you ever need to.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-37
for more information.
If your vehicle is in cruise control while TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, the cruise control can be re-engaged. See
To turn the system off or
on, press and release the
ESC/TCS button located
on the instrument panel.
When this light is on and
either the SERVICE
TRACTION or TRACTION
OFF message is
displayed, the system will
not limit wheel spin.
The DIC displays the appropriate message as described
previously when the button is pressed.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the front
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not
attempt to shift when the front wheels do not have
traction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle
is not covered. See your warranty book for
additional information.
Traction Control Operation
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate and flash
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction while driving. For more
information on the LOW TRACTION message,
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and Brake
warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, you
could damage the differential. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Reduce engine
power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively
while these lights and this message are displayed.
If your vehicle is in cruise control while the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light flashes and the cruise
control automatically disengages. When road conditions
allow you to use cruise control again, you may re-engage
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system is on,
this warning light will come
on to let you know
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction
there’s a problem.
System (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially
useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates
only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and may also
upshift the transmission to limit wheel spin. You may feel
or hear the system working, but this is normal.
The ETS warning light may come on for the following
reasons:
If your vehicle has ETS, there is not an ESC/TCS
button on the instrument panel. To turn the system
off, shift to LOW (L) or REVERSE (R). There is more
information about how to turn the system off later in
this section.
• If you turn the system off by moving the shift lever
to LOW (L), the warning light will come on and
stay on. To turn the system back on, move the shift
lever back to a position other than LOW (L). The
warning light should go off.
A LOW TRACTION message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when the traction control
system is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly.
• The warning light will come on when you set your
parking brake with the engine running, and it will
stay on if your parking brake does not release fully.
If the transmission shift lever is in any position
other than LOW (L)and the warning light stays on
after your parking brake is fully released, it
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the ETS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
means there is a problem with the system.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on when you’re
driving, there may be a problem with your ETS and
your vehicle may need service. When this warning light
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
Limited-Slip Differential
Your vehicle may have this feature. A limited-slip
transmission can give you additional traction on snow,
mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard
transmission most of the time, but when one of the front
wheels loses traction, this feature will allow the wheel
with traction to move the vehicle. The limited slip design
has minimal impact to the steering feel, but boosts
the traction performance under all conditions.
If the ETS warning light comes on and stays on for an
extended period of time when the transmission shift
lever is in any position other than LOW (L), your vehicle
needs service.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the ETS on. But
you can turn the system off if you prefer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Your vehicle may have an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system which combines antilock brake,
and traction and stability control systems that help
the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in
most driving conditions.
To turn the system off, shift to LOW (L) or REVERSE (R).
When you turn the system off, the ETS warning light will
come on and stay on when the gear shift is in LOW (L).
The warning light will not come on when the gear shift is
in REVERSE (R). If the ETS is limiting wheel spin when
you shift to LOW (L) or REVERSE (R) to turn the system
off, the warning light will come on in LOW (L). But the
system won’t turn off right away. It will wait until there’s no
longer a current need to limit wheel spin.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
there are no problems. You may hear or feel the system
working. This is normal and does not mean there is a
problem with your vehicle. The system should initialize
before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
You can turn the system back on at any time by shifting to
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or INTERMEDIATE (I).
The ETS warning light should go off.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light comes on, and the ESC OFF and/or SERVICE ESC
message displays.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information, see Driver Information
When the light is on solid and the message(s),
SERVICE ESC, ESC OFF, or both display, the system
will not assist the driver in maintaining directional
control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.
This light flashes on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system
is on and activated.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever you start your vehicle.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system on. But, you can turn ESC off if you
ever need to.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
begins to assist the driver maintain directional control of
the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
page 3-12.
ESC activates when the computer senses a discrepancy
between your intended path and the direction the vehicle
is actually travelling. ESC selectively applies braking
pressure at any one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer
the vehicle in the direction which you are steering.
When the system activates, an ESC ACTIVE message
displays on the Driver Information Center. See DIC
flashes on the instrument panel cluster when the
ESC system is on and activated. You may also hear a
noise or feel vibration in the brake pedal. This is
normal. Continue to steer the vehicle in the direction
you want it to go.
The ESC/TCS button
is located on the
instrument panel.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control system can be turned off or back on
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both
traction control and ESC, press and hold the button from
five to ten seconds.
Competitive Driving Mode
The driver can select this optional handling mode by
pressing the ESC/TCS button on the console two times
within a five second time period. COMPETITIVE
MODE will be displayed in the DIC. See DIC Warnings
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
OFF and ESC OFF messages appear, and the
ESC/TCS light comes on to warn the driver that both
traction control and ESC are disabled.
Competitive Driving Mode allows the driver to have full
control of the front wheels while the ESC system
helps maintain directional control of the vehicle by
selective brake application. The ESC/TCS light will be
on and the traction control system will not be operating.
Adjust your driving accordingly. This electronic stability
control mode is recommended only for use during closed
track events and competitive driving venues.
It is recommended that the system remain on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice
or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt
to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the
system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle
When the ESC button is pressed again, or the vehicle is
restarted, the ESC and TCS will be turned back on.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light comes
on to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and requires
service. If the problem does not clear after restarting
the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service. See DIC
information.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the front
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not
attempt to shift when the front wheels do not have
traction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle
is not covered. See your warranty book for
additional information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist
should return shortly after a few normal steering
movements.
Launch Control
If your vehicle has this feature, LAUNCH CONTROL
displays after the COMPETITIVE MODE message, when
the vehicle is stopped. Launch control is a form of
traction control, to control wheel spin while launching
the vehicle during closed track events and competitive
driving venues. The system will exit to COMPETITIVE
MODE after the vehicle is launched. See “Competitive
Driving Mode” earlier in this section. The normal Traction
Control System (TCS) will not be operating while in
the Competitive Driving mode and the TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-48 for more information.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems and/or the POWER STEERING message
comes on, contact your dealer/retailer for service
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Steering
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Electric Power Steering
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the power
steering assist system will continue to operate until you
are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power
steering assist because the electric power steering
system is not functioning, you can steer, but it will take
more effort.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
antilock brakes, adding the hard braking can demand
too much of those places. You can lose control.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Steering in Emergencies
The same thing can happen if you are steering through a
sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two
control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control. See Traction Control
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless you have
antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passing
Loss of Control
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) or
the Enhanced Traction System (ETS), remember: It
helps to avoid only the acceleration skid. See Traction
TCS or ETS, or if the system is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do
not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the
wheels are no longer rolling, release enough pressure
on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This
restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down
steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the
wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
the ESC might activate. See Electronic Stability
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Driving at Night
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION:
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-52.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
Hill and Mountain Roads
up-to-date maps?
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can
be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and the
road, you can have a very slippery situation. You have a
lot less traction, or grip, and need to be very careful.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Whether your vehicle has ABS or not, begin stopping
sooner than you would on dry pavement. Without ABS, if
you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the
brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to
get the most traction you can.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. Even if your vehicle has
the Traction Control System (TCS) or Enhanced Traction
System (ETS), slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. Under certain conditions, you might
want to turn the TCS or ETS off, such as when driving
through deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds or if your vehicle
ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See Traction
Remember, unless your vehicle has ABS, if you brake
so hard that the wheels stop rolling, you will just
slide. Brake so the wheels always keep rolling and you
can still steer.
• Whatever your vehicle’s braking system, allow
greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass can remain icy when the
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Unless your vehicle has the Antilock Brake
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
System (ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too.
If you have ABS, see Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-5. ABS improves your vehicle’s stability when
you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run the engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel.
When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than
just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses
less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery
charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart
the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with the
headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, or with a manual transmission, between
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning
the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often
help to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s
traction system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too
severe for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn
the traction system off and use the rocking method.
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does
not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to
be towed out. If your vehicle does need to be towed out,
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may properly carry, the
Tire and Loading Information label and the
Vehicle Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label lists the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight includes
the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For
page 5-60.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
There is also important loading information on the
Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this
section.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules, and trailering tips.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs
1,000 lbs
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
0 lbs (0 kg)
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door, or on
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The label shows the size of your original tires and
the inflation pressures needed to obtain the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To
find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh
your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
{CAUTION:
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Dinghy Towing
You may dinghy tow your vehicle from the front following
these steps:
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-20.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC to unlock the steering
wheel.
3. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Release the parking brake.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove the following fuse from the floor
console fuse block: 8 (Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+).
more information.
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle)
Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped with a
manual transaxle.
Remember to reinstall the fuse once you have reached
your destination.
Towing a Trailer (Automatic
Transaxle)
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed from
the rear.
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with your
vehicle.
Dolly Towing
Your vehicle cannot be dolly towed, but can be dinghy
towed. See “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section.
Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle may cause
damage because of reduced ground clearance.
Always tow your vehicle using the dinghy towing
procedure listed in this section or put your vehicle
on a flatbed truck.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with an
automatic transmission and the proper trailer towing
equipment. If your vehicle is not equipped as stated
above, do not tow a trailer. To identify the trailering
capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this
section. Trailering is different than just driving your
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, cooling, durability and fuel
economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
SS Package
If your vehicle has the SS package, it is neither designed
nor intended to tow a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer/retailer about sway controls.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to
work harder against the drag of the added weight.
The engine is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.
Also, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
• Do not tow when the outside air temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
for more information.
• Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km)
per year.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers, or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you
tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the
GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight,
more information about your vehicle’s maximum load
capacity.
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on
the rear axle will be greater than just the weight
itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the
rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs
(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but
within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to
trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the
vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce your
trailering capacity more than the total of the additional
weight.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you
with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue
weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The
only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these
ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you
must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to
avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider the
effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
Trailer Brakes
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly. Do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake
system. If you do, both brake systems will not work well,
or at all.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the
hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
water can also enter the vehicle.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle
is a good deal longer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer/retailer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the indicator
is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning to
page 5-26.
Parking on Hills
Driving on Grades
{CAUTION:
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher
than normal engine and transmission temperatures
may result and damage your vehicle. Frequent
stops are very important to allow the engine and
transmission to cool.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
When towing under severe conditions such as hot
ambient temperatures or steep grades, your vehicle may
experience more transmission shifting. A COOLING
MODE ON message may also appear in the DIC. This
alerts the driver that the shifting mode is in progress
and is aiding engine cooling. See DIC Warnings
Messages for more information.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) for an automatic transmission, or into
gear for a manual transmission. When parking
uphill, turn your wheels away from the curb. When
parking downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
page 6-4 for more on this. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid (do not overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling
system and brake system.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P) for
an automatic transmission or REVERSE (R) for a
manual transmission.
5. Release the regular brakes.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you are trailering,
it is a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-26.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know
that GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
Doing Your Own Service Work
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind
noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the 2.0L L4 engine (VIN Code X)
or the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code P), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or
higher. You can also use regular unleaded gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly
referred to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87,
you might notice a heavy knocking noise when you
drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could
damage the engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87
octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
Gasoline Octane
Gasoline Specifications
If your vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code D),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,
the engine needs service.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines
additional information.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-40. If this occurs, return to your authorized
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
might not be covered by your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Additives
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the center of
the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-48 for more information.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-40.
To close the fuel door securely, push the door to the
closed position.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if
this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Then go to the front of
the vehicle and push
the secondary hood
release lever to the left.
It is located under
the front center of
the grille.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following.
1. Pull the interior hood
release lever with this
symbol on it. It is
located to the left of
the instrument panel
on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gas struts
will automatically take over to lift and hold the
hood in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lower the hood until the lifting force
of the struts is reduced, then release the hood to
latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the process if necessary.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-33.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
C. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
on page 5-38.
E. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See
on page 5-38.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 engine, this is what you will see:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-33.
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
D. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
on page 5-23.
When to Add Engine Oil
on page 5-38.
page 5-38.
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add
at least one quart/liter of the recommended oil.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
For Vehicles With the 2.2L or
2.4L L4 Engine
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
2.2L L4 Engine and
2.4L L4 Engine
2.0L L4 Engine
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an
oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
For Vehicles with the 2.0L L4 Engine Only
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for three things:
• GM4718M
Look for this on the oil container, and use only those
oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard
GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on the front
of the oil container.
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M, such as Mobil 1® or
equivalent. Oils meeting this standard may
be identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic
oils will meet this GM standard. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
synthetic oil which meets all requirements for your
vehicle.
Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which
an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, you must
reset the system every time the oil is changed.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will come
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
might not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained
service people who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all
you need for good performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Your vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, a computer
system that lets you know when to change the engine
oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions
and engine temperature, and not on mileage.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change the oil prior
to a CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on,
reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the information and reset buttons on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) at the same
time to enter the personalization menu. See DIC
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes until the
DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell you
the system has been reset.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the reset procedure.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change. For vehicles with
the 2.0L engine, inspect at each oil change. Replace
filter if it appears dusty or dirty.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required. Never use compressed air
to clean the filter.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter (2.2L or 2.4L Engine)
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Disconnect the MAF sensor, PCV hose, and
both ducts.
2. Pull the entire system from the top of the engine.
3. Turn the system over and place it on a soft,
non-abrasive surface.
4. Remove the screws that hold the housing and
cover together and lift off the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the system. Be sure
to reinstall the housing tightly.
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Engine Only)
1. Remove the screws that hold the housing and
cover together and lift off the cover.
2. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Reverse the steps to reinstall the system. Be sure
to reinstall the housing tightly.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required. Never use compressed air to clean
the filter.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid
level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to a
dealer/retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission
fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason
for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to a
dealer/retailer for service. Have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have your fluid level checked by
your dealer/retailer when you have your oil changed.
for the proper fluid to use.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
the Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4. Be sure to use the transmission fluid
page 6-12.
Hydraulic Clutch
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. This system does not have its own
reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Use
Engine Coolant
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-26.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery tank
cap has this symbol on it.
The tank is located in
the engine compartment
toward the front of the
engine on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the COLD FILL (A) line or a little higher. The COLD
FILL line is near the bottom of the tank and sticks out
from the rear of the tank.
more information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but
only when the engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, a
special fill procedure is necessary. See Cooling System
on page 5-28 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
for more information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature warning light and a
coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s instrument
panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An engine coolant temperature warning can indicate a
serious problem. See Engine Coolant Temperature
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you get an engine coolant temperature warning, but
see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
If you get the engine coolant temperature warning with
no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn it off.
2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
A. Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant.
That could cause an engine fire, and you could
be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the COLD FILL line. If it is not, you may
have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere in
the cooling system.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, than the vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank, add
coolant at the pressure cap as follows:
How to Add Coolant to the
Cooling System
Notice: The engine has a specific cooling system
drain and fill procedure. Failure to follow this
procedure could cause the engine to overheat and
be severely damaged. If the engine’s cooling system
needs to be drained and re-filled, please see the
dealer/retailer.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
They are under pressure, and if you turn the
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the pressure cap, is
hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure
cap to cool if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.
If no problem is found, but the coolant level in the
coolant recovery tank is below the COLD FILL line,
add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolant recovery
information.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. Remove the pressure
cap when the cooling
system, including
the pressure cap and
upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left to be vented.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to
the coolant fill port, up to the base of the port.
information about the proper coolant mixture.
6. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the pressure cap off.
7. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
8. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler port may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the fill port until the level reaches the base
of the fill port.
9. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure, if coolant begins to flow out of the
fill port, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
10. When the engine has cooled, check the coolant in
the coolant recovery tank. The level in the coolant
recovery tank should be at the COLD FILL line
when the engine is cold.
5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
FILL (A) line.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on
the brake or clutch hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master
cylinder and, on manual
transmission vehicles,
the clutch hydraulic system
use the same reservoir.
The reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake or clutch hydraulic system.
If it is, you should have the brake or clutch hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or
later your brakes or clutch will not work well.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
or clutch hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake or clutch hydraulic
system can damage brake or clutch hydraulic
system parts so badly that they will have
to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or
clutch hydraulic system, the brakes or clutch
might not work well. This could cause a crash.
Always use the proper brake fluid.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
can come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
If your vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have
wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake
rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected
immediately. Rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation
or changing. When you have the front brake pads
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
{CAUTION:
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Battery
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it
is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the cargo area.
You do not need to access the battery to jump start
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
The remote positive
terminal is located under
a red tethered cap on
the engine compartment
fuse block. Remove
the cap to access the
terminal.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Do not remove fuse block cover to jump start
the vehicle.
The remote negative (−)
ground terminal, marked
GND (−), is located at
the front of the engine
compartment on the
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located in the rear cargo area.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and
a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal.
driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION: (Continued)
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle with
the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
negative (−) ground terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its original
position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should:
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be
necessary.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other
flat surface.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to
be re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
• Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
• Have all tires properly inflated.
• Have the spare tire is in its original location in the
vehicle.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the vertical aim:
for more information.
4. At the wall measure from the ground upward (A)
to the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
2. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low-beam headlamp. Record the distance.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. Do not place directly
on the headlamp. This allows only the beam of
light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen
on the flat surface.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
Driver Side Shown
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm hex socket.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
A. Headlamp
B. Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the headlamp, turn signal, or parking
lamp bulb:
3. Reach in behind the wheel well liner and locate the
bulb to be changed.
1. Turn the wheel to access the wheel well.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove.
5. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall.
2. Remove the fasteners to access the headlamp and
the turn signal/parking lamp bulbs.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
To replace the center high-mounted stoplamp bulb:
for more information.
6. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
7. Install a new bulb.
8. Reverse the steps to reinstall.
2. Remove the center trim located near the top of
the liftgate.
3. Locate the bulb assembly.
4. Locate the bulb you wish to change.
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
2. Remove the cover in the rear cargo area of the
vehicle to access the bulbs.
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
out of the lamp housing.
To replace one of these bulbs:
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
5. Install a new bulb. When installing the bulb socket
into the assembly, line up the tabs with the slots in
the bulb assembly.
more information.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
License Plate Lamp
Replacement Bulbs
To replace one of these bulbs:
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps to the fascia.
Back-up Lamp and CHMSL
921
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamp (Amber)
5702KA
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamp (Clear)
B2N
H13
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal
3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type and
page 6-14. Here’s how to remove the wiper blade:
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Remove the protective cap from the wiper arm.
If the protective cap is not removed before lifting
the wiper arm, the wiper arm could be damaged.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Pull the wiper arm away from the backglass and
into the service position.
3. Rotate the wiper blade, and pull down on it to
remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the new wiper blade, then set the wiper arm
back into its original position and replace the
protective cap.
2. While holding the wiper arm, lift the clip up from the
blade connecting point, and pull the blade assembly
down toward the windshield to remove it from the
wiper arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade on the wiper arm
and press down on the clip to snap it into place.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your vehicle’s tires are cold.
page 5-60.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of
too much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn,
or if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
If your vehicle has P225/45R18 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These
tires are designed for very responsive driving on
wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile performance tires and
that they tend to wear faster.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb. Your
vehicle warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 5-60.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type, and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire
size means the tire is for temporary use only.
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high
as it is wide.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
page 4-27.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-27.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 5-68.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more
weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even when
they are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
for additional information.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be
viewed by the driver. For additional information
and details about the DIC operation and displays see
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. If your vehicle has this feature, TPMS sensors
are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly,
excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires
and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS turns on the low tire
pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC
message to come on are:
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
page 5-69.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel location.
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel locations,
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the
same time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the
sensor identification code has been matched to the
tire/wheel position.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match any
tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you need to start over.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to
indicate the tire learning process is done. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to
achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that your vehicle continues to
perform most like it did when the tires were new.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS
learn mode, or if communication with the receiver
stops, or if the time limit has expired, turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start over
beginning with Step 2.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System.
page 5-63.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use
the correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it
did when the tires were new. Replacing less than
a full set of tires can affect the braking and
handling performance of your vehicle. See Tire
information on proper tire rotation.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires
for your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage to
your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
It is all right to drive with your compact
spare temporarily, as it was developed for
use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
page 5-53 for additional information.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires
may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with
those that do not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same size, load range,
speed rating, and construction type (radial
and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
information.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on the
front tires.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Your vehicle may have a tire sealant and compressor kit
that is capable of temporarily sealing a puncture up to
1
⁄
4
inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. If your vehicle
has this kit, there is no jack or spare tire. The kit inflates
the tire with liquid sealant and air. The tire sealant and
compressor kit can also be used to inflate an
underinflated tire. After the tire is inflated to the
recommended inflation pressure, see Inflation - Tire
must be driven for five miles to distribute the sealant in
the tire and to seal the puncture. After driving five miles,
the tire pressure must be rechecked and adjusted as
needed. See Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
later in this section. Be sure to read and follow all of the
tire sealant and compressor kit instructions. The kit
includes the following:
A. Air Compressor
B. Tire Sealant Canister
C. Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
E. Air Pressure Gage
F. Air Compressor
Inflator Hose
G. Sealant Filling Hose
D. On/Off Switch
After temporarily repairing a tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer as soon as possible. If the sealant is
not removed from the tire within 100 miles
(161 kilometers) of driving, the dealer/retailer may
recommend that the tire be replaced.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
To access the tire sealant and compressor kit:
more information
3. Remove the foam retainer bolt (B) holding down the
foam container.
4. Remove the foam container (C).
5. Remove the sealant and compressor kit (A) from its
foam container.
2. Remove the cargo cover.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal a Punctured Tire
Read and follow the safety handling instructions on the
sealant canister.
Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.
The sealant can temporarily seal a puncture up to
1. Place the sealant and compressor kit on the ground
and unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.
1
⁄
4
inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. The sealant
cannot seal sidewall damage, large punctures, or a
tire that has unseated from the wheel. See Roadside
2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug from
the unit. To do this, pull the top portion of the
wrapped cord out first, then the bottom, and then
unsnap the plug. Do not insert the plug into an
accessory outlet yet.
The sealant can only be used to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and the sealant filling hose
assembly must be replaced at a dealer/retailer. See
Removal and Installation of Sealant Canister later in this
section.
3. Remove the valve stem or tire pressure monitoring
sensor cap from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister, if it has expired, see your dealer/retailer for a
replacement.
If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated the tire,
do not remove it.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
The vehicle must be running while using the air
compressor.
{CAUTION:
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
Make sure the sealant and compressor kit on/off
switch (B) is in the O (off) position.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C) into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See Accessory
Do not slam door or close window on the
compressor accessory plug cord.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Push the On/Off switch to the I (on) position.
9. Push the sealant and compressor kit switch to the
O (off) position.
The sealant and compressor kit injects sealant
and air into the tire. Sealant can leak from
the puncture until the vehicle is driven and the hole
has sealed.
10. The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air
until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire.
The pressure gage will initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the sealant into the
tire. Once the sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop and start
to rise again as the tire inflates with air.
Steps 11 through 18 must be done right after
Step 9.
11. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug from the
accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
12. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the tire
valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and
replace the tire valve stem cap.
8. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure, found on the Tire and Loading Information
label located on the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar)
below the vehicle’s door latch, using the air pressure
gage on the top of the unit.
Be careful when handling the tire inflator
components as they could be hot after usage.
The pressure gage reads high while the compressor
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an
accurate pressure reading.
13. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
14. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back in the
air compressor. To do this, wrap the air compressor
accessory plug, snap in the plug, and then push
in the bottom and then the top of the wrapped
air compressor accessory plug.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle should not be
driven farther. Damage to the tire is severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Remove the
air compressor plug from the accessory power
outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire
page 7-6 for more information.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. If the flat tire was able
to inflate to the
{CAUTION:
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister.
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit
or other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h)
until you have the damaged tire inspected
and repaired.
18. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 under Accessing the
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit earlier in this
section.
19. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant evenly in the tire. Stop at a
safe location and check the tire pressure, refer
to Steps 1 through 8 under Using the Air
16. Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield
or to the face of the radio/clock.
Compressor without Sealant next in this section.
17. Return the equipment to the proper storage location
in the rear of your vehicle. To do this, insert the tire
sealant and compressor kit back into the foam
container and place the foam container onto the
storage bracket. Securely tighten down the
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, you can inflate the tire back up to
the recommended inflation pressure.
foam container with the foam retainer bolt.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20. If the tire pressure has fallen more then 10 psi
(68 kPa), below the recommended inflation
pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is
too severely damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot seal the tire. See Roadside
information.
Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant to Inflate an Underinflated Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
1. Remove the air compressor inflating hose connector
from the bottom of the air compressor.
21. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire and
vehicle with a rag.
22. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance with any local, state,
and provincial codes and practices.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with a
new canister from a dealer/retailer.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire with the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer/retailer to have the tire inspected
and repaired.
2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the sealant
canister by pulling up on the lever.
3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
tire valve stem and push the lever down to
secure in place.
{CAUTION:
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See Accessory
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
7. Push the sealant and compressor kit switch to
the I (on) position.
8. Inflate the tire up to the recommended inflation
pressure using the air pressure gage on the top
of the unit.
The pressure gage reads high while the compressor
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an
page 5-60 for more information.
The vehicle must be running while using the
air compressor.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Turn off the air compressor by moving the switch to
the O (off) position.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister, do the following:
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit
or other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.
10. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and wrap
the hose in the bottom of the sealant and
compressor kit.
11. Place the equipment in its original location.
1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister by pulling the lever up.
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose from
the sealant canister.
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To install a new sealant canister, do the following:
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in the
air compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling hose
is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor and
replace with a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire (Vehicles with
spare tire)
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by
driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as
a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire, the jack,
wheel wrench, and spare tire are stowed in the rear of
the vehicle, underneath the floor of the cargo area.
To remove the spare tire and tools:
more information.
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
2. Remove the cargo cover.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tools needed are the jack (A) and wheel wrench (B).
3. Turn the retainer counterclockwise to remove the
tire cover.
4. Remove the tire cover.
5. Remove the spare tire by placing your hands at the
four and eight o’clock positions. Gently pull it up
and out of the trunk. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-109.
6. Remove the wing nut that holds the jack. Then
remove the jack, wheel wrench, and flat tire strap.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the plastic wheel nut counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel wrench from the jack.
Press the button and then pull on the end of the wheel
wrench to extend the handle.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the rear road tire:
Removing the Flat Tire and
Rear Tire Changing Procedure
Installing the Spare Tire (SS Model)
The SS Model has larger performance brakes than
the Base Model. The compact spare tire will not clear
the front brakes.
Do not use the compact spare tire in the event of a front
flat tire.
You must use the rear tire to replace the front flat tire.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts
on the rear tire. Do not remove them yet.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up
is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
3. Position the jack on the rear position and raise the
jack lift head to fit over the car flange under the
down arrow markings on the rocker panel.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove all the
wheel nuts and
take off the tire.
CAUTION: (Continued)
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or
wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
6. Install the compact spare tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose.
The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing
a crash.
9. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get
new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the front flat tire:
Front Tire Changing Procedure
1. Perform a rear tire change by removing the rear tire
and installing the compact spare tire in the rear
wheel location. The rear road tire will be used
to replace the front flat tire. See Rear Tire Changing
Procedure in this section.
3. Position the jack on the front position and raise the
jack lift head to fit over the car flange under the
down arrow markings on the rocker panel.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts
on the front flat tire. Do not remove them yet.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the tire.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
CAUTION: (Continued)
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or
wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces,
and wheel.
6. Install the tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Place the tire on the wheel mounting surface.
9. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each by hand
until the wheel is held against the hub.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose.
The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing
a crash.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get
new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
(All Models Except SS)
3. Position the jack and raise the jack lift head to fit
over the car flange under the down arrow markings
on the rocker panel.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
CAUTION: (Continued)
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or
wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose.
The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing
a crash.
8. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get
new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
10. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
Aluminum Wheel
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
To store the flat tire:
more information.
2. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear
storage compartment and put the compartment cover
back on. For more information, see “Storing the
Compact Spare Tire and Tools” next in this section.
3. Install the cargo cover. For more information,
page 2-48.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Attach the strap to the
cargo tie-downs in the
rear of the vehicle.
6. Tighten the tie-down strap.
Steel Wheel
4. Route the tie-down strap through the tire as shown
in the graphic
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the Compact Spare Tire
and Tools
Use the diagram as a guide for storing the compact
spare tire once you are done using it.
more information.
2. Install the strap (F) on the floor of the spare tire
compartment.
3. Place the jack and wheel wrench (E) over the
bolt (G), making sure the strap is securely
stored, under the jack and wheel wrench.
4. Secure the jack and wheel wrench (E) with the
wing nut (D).
5. With the valve stem up, place the spare tire (C) on
the compartment floor.
6. Make sure the bolt (G) passes through the wheel
center.
7. Install the spare tire cover (B).
8. Secure the spare tire and tools with the retainer (A).
The compact spare tire storage area is designed only
for the compact spare tire, the standard tire cannot
be stored there.
A. Retainer
B. Cover
E. Jack and Wheel
Wrench
C. Spare Tire
D. Wing Nut
F. Strap
G. Bolt
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild
soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and
dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic
surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and coatings that
are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the appearance and feel
of your interior and are not recommended. Do not use
silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow all manufacturers’ directions regarding correct
product usage, necessary safety precautions and
appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
Washing Your Vehicle
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not
use it on your vehicle or damage may occur
and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-113.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that
are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil
and asphalt.
Cleans, shines and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
engine code.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
5-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the floor
console fuse block and the engine compartment
fuse block.
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
There are also one or two fuses located at the back of
the vehicle near the battery.
5-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Floor Console Fuse Block
The floor console fuse block is located on the passenger
side of the floor console behind the forward panel.
The panel has four clips, one in each corner. Pull the
panel to disconnect the four clips, and access the fuses.
Use the fuse puller to remove fuses.
5-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fuse Puller
Empty
Electric Power Steering, Steering
Wheel Control
19
20
21
22
23
24
Sunroof
Empty
Spare
Empty
Empty
Empty
Audio System
XM Radio™, OnStar™
Amplifier
Cluster
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+
25
Stoplamp
26
27
28
29
Door Locks
Heating, Ventilation, Air
Interior Lights
10
Conditioning, PASS-Key® III+
Steering Wheel Control Illumination
Power Windows
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Empty
Spare
Airbag
Relays
30
Usage
Climate Control System
Empty
Spare
Windshield Wiper
31
Climate Control System, Ignition
Window Retained Accessory Power
Empty
32
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
5-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
Electric Power Steering
Rear Defogger
1
2
3
4
5
6
The underhood fuse block is located on the driver side
of the engine compartment. Lift the cover to access
the fuse/relay block.
Empty
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Body Control Module 3
Starting System
Body Control Module 2
Rear Power Plug (Panel Van Only),
Cooling Fan (SS only)
7
8
Empty
9
Air Conditioning Clutch Diode
Liftgate, Sunroof
Empty
10
11
12
13
20
21
22
23
Rear Power Outlet (Panel Van Only)
Fuel Pump
Rear Wiper
Mirror
Air Conditioning
Heated Seats (Option)
5-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
25
Usage
Fuses
47
Usage
Heated Seat (Option)
Windshield Washer Pump
Fog Lamps (Option)
Fuse Puller
Empty
27
49
29
Cigarette Lighter
Power Outlet
53
30
Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM)
56
31
Daytime Running Lamps
Empty
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
69
Antilock Brake System (Option)
Windshield Wiper Diode
Windshield Wiper
32
33
Emissions
36
Power Windows (Turbo Only)
Power Seat (Option)
Cooling Fan
Horn
37
Antilock Brake System (Option)
Instrument Panel, Ignition
Driver Side High-Beam
Canister Vent
40
41
Engine Control Module
Cam Phaser (Turbo Only)
42
Engine Control Module,
Transmission
43
Driver Side Low-Beam
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Passenger Side High-Beam
Parking Lamps
44
45
46
Antilock Brake System (Option)
Injectors, Ignition Module
Backup Lamps
5-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
14
Usage
Rear Defogger Relay
Air Conditioning Clutch
Empty
Relays
54
Usage
Fog Lamps (Option)
15
55
Horn
16
68
Parking Lamps
Windshield Wipers
Headlamp Low-Beam
Headlamp High-Beam
17
Rear Wiper
70
18
Liftgate Release
Fuel Pump
71
19
72
24
Empty
A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Relay, and a Rear
Access Panel Door Interlock Relay (Panel Van only),
are located underhood in front of the left shock tower.
26
Powertrain
28
Daytime Running Lamps
Starting System
Empty
34
The Left Rear Access Panel Door Relay (Panel Van
Only), and the Right Rear Access Panel Door Relay
(Panel Van Only) are located in the rear of the vehicle
behind the right rear quarter trim panel.
35
38
Empty
39
Windshield Washer Pump
Rear Windshield Washer
Cooling Fan
A Rear Power Plug mini fuse (Panel Van Only) is
located near the battery in the rear of the vehicle.
48
50
51
Run, Crank
52
Windshield Wiper
5-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Maintenance
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located under
the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
2.0L Engine
9.2 qt
7.4 qt
8.7 qt
8.5 qt
5.0 qt
16.2 gal
6.9 qt
8.7 L
7.0 L
8.2 L
8.0 L
4.7 L
61.3 L
6.5 L
2.2L Engine
2.4L Engine Manual
2.4L Engine Automatic
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Transaxle, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill)
Transaxle, Manual with 2.0L Engine
(Complete Drain and Refill)
2.0 qt
1.9 L
Transaxle, Manual with 2.2L or 2.4L Engine
(Complete Drain and Refill)
1.7 qt
1.6 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual.
5-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
Manual
2.0L L4
X
0.035 in (0.90 mm)
Automatic
Manual
2.2L L4
2.4L L4
D
P
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
Automatic
Manual
5-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
CAUTION: (Continued)
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
If you have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer
to have a qualified technician do the work. See
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
{CAUTION:
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months
since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the CHANGE OIL SOON
message comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all for
one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
2.2L and 2.4L engines: Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
2.0L engine only: Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See
•
•
•
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 6-9.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service only). See
footnote (h).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote (m).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear
or cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums,
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hinges
and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear. Inspect power steering cables for
proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine
parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
page 5-114 for more information.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
At Each Fuel Fill
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-24.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
{CAUTION:
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Tire Inflation Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
page 5-60. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle
starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-66.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal down halfway,
and try to start the engine. The vehicle should
start only when the clutch pedal is pushed down all
the way to the floor. If the vehicle starts when
the clutch pedal is not pushed all the way down,
contact your dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transmission, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P). The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
• With a manual transmission, the ignition key should
come out only in LOCK/OFF.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right. It
should only lock when turned to the right. Contact your
dealer/retailer if service is required.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
on page 2-33.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism
Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
{CAUTION:
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
System
page 5-24.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
Hydraulic
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Clutch System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
(API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Engine Oil
(2.2L and 2.4L
L4 engines)
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. 12377985, in
Parking Brake
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Cable Guides
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
page 5-15.
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
Manual
Manual Transmission Fluid
Transmission
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800, in
(2.2L and 2.4L
L4 engines)
Canada 88861801).
standard can be identified with the
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. However, not all
synthetic API oils with the starburst
symbol will meet this GM standard.
Look for and use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M. For
the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil
on page 5-15.
Manual
Manual Transmission Fluid
Transmission
Engine Oil
(2.0L L4
engine)
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862472, in
(2.0L L4
Canada 88862473).
engine)
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Key Lock
Cylinders
Pivots, Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Category LB or GC-LB.
Manual
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Transmission Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Shift Linkage meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Chassis
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Lubrication
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
ACDelco® Part
Part
GM Part Number
Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.0L Engine
15909459
22731072
12605566
52493319
—
2.2L and 2.4L Engines
Engine Oil Filter
A3054C
PF457G
CF125
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
2.0L Engine
12617309
12598004
41-108
41-103
2.2L and 2.4L Engines
Windshield Wiper Blade
Driver’s Side – 17.7 inches (45 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 17.7 inches (45 cm)
Rear Wiper Blade – 10.8 inches (27.4 cm)
15949643
15949635
22709463
—
—
—
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or
the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre
by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not
agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to
binding arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by an
impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal
hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed
so that the entire dispute settlement process, from
the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in
most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call
the General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French),
or you may write to:
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Mediation/Arbitration Program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe
to E-News and use tools and forms with
greater ease.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can
dial 1-800-263-3830.)
My GM Canada (Canada only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canada — Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance Offices
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
United States — Customer Assistance
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Overseas — Customer Assistance
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
From Puerto Rico:
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872);
(Text telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program.
Who is Covered?
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of
eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner
is not eligible for coverage.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Services Provided
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels will not
be provided through this service.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests will be limited to
six per calendar year.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty related
vehicle disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from the original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of $500
(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day),
(B) lodging (maximum of $100/night) and
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of
$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of
the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting
for your vehicle to be repaired.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and a
copy of the repair order are required.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in North
America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction
devices.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement to
an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,
the claims become excessive in frequency or type of
occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
Scheduling Service Appointments
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
• Description of the problem
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day
repair.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer
you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported
by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
Repair Facility
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do
not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of
mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer/retailer, or General
Motors.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Service Bulletins
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
manual for more information.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-62
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-14
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical System (cont.)
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-119
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel (cont.)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Warning
Locks (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-65
Radios (cont.)
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-63
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-28
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
